Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

Introduction In this tutorial. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. 1 . Finally. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project.

2 .

Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. such as duct. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. such as mechanical equipment. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. and piping. 3 . electrical panels. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. electrical. Germany. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. and plumbing engineering workflows. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. and plumbing fixtures. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. Add basic MEP elements. fixtures. Add more detailed modelling elements.

you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. as well as how to open and save them. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. you can choose to save your work. Metric: files for users working with metric units. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . So. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. NOTE Depending on your installation. You do not design entire systems. and tags. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. to provide a richer and more finished design. such as templates and families. After completing each exercise. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. Contact your CAD manager for more information. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. Metric file names have an _m suffix. For example. Create schedules. you learn where the training files are located. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. When you install the training files as instructed. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. when you add ductwork. templates. When you open a training file. These elements enhance the exercises you complete.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. annotations. however. However. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. your Training folder may be in a different location. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. For example. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. is located and accessed in the training files location. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. Create detail views. On the Contents tab. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In this exercise. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. and sheets to document the project. views. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building.

For example. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. and click the Training Files icon. click ➤ Save As. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. 4 Click the training file name. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. if you open settings. You may close the file with or without saving changes. Accessing Training Files | 5 . If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. 8 If you have made changes.rvt and make changes. and click Save. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. and click Open.rvt) is selected. enter the new file name. For Files of type. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. and you can open any supported file type. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. For File name. you are prompted to save the changes. double-click Imperial or Metric. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes.rvt. 3 In the right pane. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. a list of file types displays. scroll down. verify that Project Files (*. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. select the folder in which to save the new file. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. the Open dialog displays.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu.

6 .

and plans. the door retains this relationship to the partition. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. If you move the partition. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. In this case. quantities. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. every drawing sheet. ■ ■ 7 . If the length of the elevation is changed. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. the parameter is one of association or connection. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. sections. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. 2D and 3D view. hence. the floor or roof remains connected. drawings. the operation of the software is parametric. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. As you work in drawing and schedule views. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. You learn the terminology. drawing sheets. the hierarchy of elements. and schedules required for a building project. and phases when you need it. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. In this case. scope. In the Revit MEP model. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. schedules. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design.

They help to describe or document the design. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. sprinklers. and 2D detail components. Datum elements help to define project context. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. dimensions. sinks. levels. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. For example. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. and electrical panels. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. tags. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . walls and ceilings are hosts. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. ducts. They display in relevant views of the design. For example. boilers. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. tags. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. filled regions. boilers. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. For example. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. and keynotes are annotation elements. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. sinks. Examples include detail lines. When you change something. dimensions. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. sprinklers. For example. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. ducts. For example. For example. and electrical panels. and reference planes are datum elements. grids.

However. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. section views. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. or bottom of foundation. you can explicitly control them. elevation views. families. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. and types.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. top of wall. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. you do nothing to establish these relationships. and drawings of the design. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. and ceilings. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . programming is not required. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. In other cases. Project: In Revit MEP. schedules. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. you must be in a section or elevation view. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. Often. The project file contains all information for the building design. Most often. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. North . such as roofs.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. By using a single project file. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. For example. and so forth). Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. floors. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In Revit MEP. first floor. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. If you can draw. from geometry to construction data. To place levels. for example. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. This information includes components used to design the model. views of the project. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design.

each in-place family contains only a single type. and similar graphical representation. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . A type can also be a style. showing. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). However. You can also display several project views at one time. Unlike system and standard component families. A type can be a specific size of a family. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. With a few clicks. or layer the views to see only the one on top. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. For example. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. System families include ducts. pipes. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. and wires. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. Type: Each family can have several types. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. For example. such as a 30” X 42” title block. For example. System families can be transferred between projects. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. Then experiment with them. hiding. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. identical use. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow.

or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. To return the panel to the ribbon. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon.

tools used for managing and modifying the current view. tools used for editing existing elements. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members.. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. select the tool first.. When working on the Modify tab. and settings.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. then select what you want to modify. and CAD files. architect-specific tools. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. project and system parameters. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. tools used for running analysis on the current design. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. and for switching views. data and systems.

By default. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. provides access to common tools. To keep a panel expanded. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. For example. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. provides requested information. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). when adding duct.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . displays frequently used tools. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. closes the application menu (double-click).

The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. (Save As) export the current drawing. such as Export and Publish. select a file to open.. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics ... (Open) save the current drawing. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. click.. select a template and create a new drawing. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. (Export) On the application menu. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu.

(Licensing) close the file.. but is not enabled by default. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server.. enters selection mode and ends the current operation.. annotation. and Walkthrough. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. family.. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. Camera. saves a current project. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. or template file. To enable or disable a tool item. to. click. (Print) access product and license information. or template file. publish the current project.On the application menu. annotation. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. family. (Publish) print the current drawing. provides views including Default 3D.

the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. To hide the Status Bar. when you switch to another editing mode. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. However. workshared components. Starting with the most recent command. When you are using a command. In addition. When you are highlighting an element or component. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. Clear the Status Bar check mark. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. or the Family Editor. Modify. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon.To undo or redo a series of operations. To show the Status Bar again. repeat the command. Clipboard. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. displaying the same information. Group. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. check the Status Bar. This displays the command history in a list.

To cancel or exit the current command. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. On the Quick Access toolbar. for example. Place a Wall. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. When you place an element in a drawing. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. To change existing elements to a different type. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. click (Modify). It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. select one or more elements of the same category. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 .

In the following steps. Zoom the view In the tutorials. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window.rvt.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. After you are familiar with these tasks. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. For example. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. There are several ways to access zoom options. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. 1 Click ➤ Open. click Training Files.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options.

NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. If you do not have a wheel mouse. 6 Click in the drawing area. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. click . Modifying the View | 19 . 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). the view zooms in on the selected area. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 9 To display SteeringWheels. To modify or add snap increments. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. NOTE As you zoom in and out. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. on the Navigation bar. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. In the drawing area. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. When you release the mouse button. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass.

click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. 14 To exit the wheel. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. press ESC. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. For more information about SteeringWheels. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. click the SteeringWheels tab. To define settings for SteeringWheels. and then using the Zoom tool again.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. As you move the mouse. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. ➤ Options. and click tin the Options dialog. Click and drag to orbit the design. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . moving the wheel to the desired location. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area.

17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view.HVAC Plan . called drag controls. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. and open Level 2 . Small blue dots. After you are familiar with these tasks.Design. and select the duct.Design ➤ Floor Plans. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. display along the ends. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. 2 Enter ZR. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . Similar controls. referred to as shape handles. bottoms. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. These are the drag controls. as shown.

6 On the Undo menu. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. In this example. Move. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. on the Standard toolbar. All changes you make to a project are tracked.3 Click and drag the bottom control. or press CTRL+Z. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. select the first item in the list. click the Undo command. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct.

Some commands. 11 With the duct already selected.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . for example. In this case. click to specify the starting position. require 2 clicks to complete the command. such as Move and Copy. you want to move the duct. and click again to specify the ending position. as shown. 10 Move the cursor to the right. and drag it to the left as shown. After selecting the element to move. The duct is moved to the new position. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location.

Press ESC twice. For example. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . 14 Enter VG. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command.Return. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. 13 To end a command. Select Mechanical . you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed.Supply. Click OK. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog.End a command Some commands. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. such as the Modify Ducts command. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways.

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

settings. such as coordination review and interference checking. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. and loadable families.rte template. you learn how to start a project from a template. and modify system settings. and geometry from the starting template. 2 In the New Project dialog. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. 5 In the New Project dialog. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. click Browse. under Template file. You can choose from several templates. New projects inherit all the families. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. You can either select a template from the template library. 6 Click OK. the default building levels and standard views. 27 . 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. create and manage views. such as the default project units and settings. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. In that case. link files. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. Finally. use copy/monitor. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. under Create new. system families. such as ducts and pipes. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. select Project. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. click Training files. and click Open.

you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. 8 In the drawing area. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project.rte template and click Open. select Level 1. you can select it now. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. click Browse. create another new project using the Construction template. Click OK twice. and open North. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. If you want to use a template other than the default. For example. 10 Using the same method. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. review the construction materials listed. select Project template. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. for Energy Data. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. click Edit. Click OK. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. When you select the material. click (Browse). select School or University. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. for City. ■ ■ Under Create new. (Browse). In the Choose Template dialog. Click Cancel. ■ For Building Construction. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. NH. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. navigate to Imperial Templates. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. under Energy Analysis. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. For Location. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. 9 Close the file with or without saving it.7 In the Project Browser. select Manchester.

ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 10 1/2". clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. plumbing. 26 In the right pane. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. click Rectangular. 4 1/2". 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. 23 In the left pane. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. 4 1/2". piping. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. 22 In the right pane.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. for 3 1/2". After standard settings have been established for an organization. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. for 3 1/2". click Round. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 25 In the left pane. For Categories. under Duct Settings. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 27 Click OK. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. and fire protection systems. under Pipe Settings. 5 1/2". 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. Holding CTRL. click Wiring. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . for 3/4". Click OK twice. click Sizes. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. power distribution systems. 24 In the right pane.rfa and click Open. 33 Click OK. select Views. 11 1/2". wiring. under Duct Settings. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. and 12 1/2". and demand factors for electrical systems. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. and 5 1/2". clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. select Identity Data.

2 In the New Project dialog. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. For Sort by. Click Open. under Template file. For Then by. In addition. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. 5 Click OK. select Associated Level. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. select Sub-Discipline. click Training. select Project. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. You need to create the MEP model for the project. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. From the Positioning list. families. 4 In the New Project dialog. Select Ascending Click OK twice. For Then by. select Family and Type. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . sheets. 38 Close the file. click Browse. under Create new. select Auto . you link the architectural model with the MEP model.rvt. Linking Projects In this exercise. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. select View Name. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. Notice that the file is saved as a template. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. and groups that are contained in a project. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project.Origin to Origin. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. To enable this coordination.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog.11 In the Places dialog. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. or families. and click OK twice. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Add Value). 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. ➤ Open. 15 Under Library Name. click My Library. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Save. and change the name to My Library. and select it as the library path. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and click Open. and click (Browse). and Import dialogs. click the My Library icon. Load. templates.

and decal image files. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 3 Under Settings. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 2 In the Options dialog. enter sheetmtl-Cu. click Edit. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 22 Select My Library. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. If you want to relocate this path. 14 Click in the drawing area. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. If you work in a large office. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. select Ignore words in uppercase. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 9 In the text editor. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 12 Create a new project using the default template.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. click OK. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 19 Click Cancel. custom color files. such as bump maps. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . This path is determined during installation. 20 Click ➤ Options. view the current path. 11 In the Options dialog. click the Spelling tab. 27 Click OK. 5 In the text editor. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. specify the new location here. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. (Remove Value) to delete the library. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. click Edit. 21 On the File Locations tab. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. click Places. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary.

work with snapping turned off. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 21 Under Personal dictionary. 22 In the text editor. under Template file. click Training Files. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. click Close. 4 In the New Project dialog. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 25 Close the file without saving it. click OK. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. click File menu ➤ Save.rte. and enter 1 . You can turn snap settings on and off. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 2 In the New Project dialog. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 6 In the Snaps dialog. click the Spelling tab. under Dimension Snaps. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 18 Click ➤ Options.17 In the Spelling dialog. click OK. 23 In the text editor. click Restore Defaults. delete sheetmtl-CU. you modify snap increments. 20 Under Settings. In this exercise. As you zoom in and out within a view. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. click Browse.. click Edit. 24 In the Options dialog. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. you modify snap settings. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . 19 In the Options dialog.

8 In the Snaps dialog. use the wheel button on your mouse. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. zoom out until it does so. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. such as ZO to zoom out. This is the increment that you added previously. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. deselect Chain. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. If you do not have a wheel button. TIP To zoom while sketching. 10 On the Options Bar. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. If it does not. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. snapping reverts to the system default settings. click OK. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 .7 Under Object Snaps. For example. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. and move the cursor to the right. While sketching. enter SM.

20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall.. it will snap to the endpoints. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 19 Enter SM. 22 Move the cursor downward. 25 Click OK. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. and the wall edges. the midpoint. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. Notice that snapping is once again active. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. and delete the value 1’ . and specify the wall endpoint. Do not set the wall end point. and move the cursor to the right. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. If you move the cursor along the wall. 26 Close the file. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. with or without saving it. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall.

You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. 43 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial.

44 .

water source heat pump (WSHP). To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. you will understand the process. In this lesson. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. and then you create a plenum level.autodesk. After finishing each exercise.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. duct system and a hydronic piping system. This system consists of a cooling tower. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you can choose to save your work. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. you first configure the linked architectural model. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. As you create the mechanical system. However. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you first plan the system. In this exercise. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. methodology. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. After applying a color scheme to the zones. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you design a mechanical system for an office building. At the end of the tutorial. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. By following the recommended workflow. go to http://www. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. 45 . If the tutorial training files are not present. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems.

under Constraints. 4 In the Type Properties dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click OK. In this section. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. and after the linked model highlights. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. indicating that it’s the active view. Next. ceilings. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model.Space Plan is highlighted. select Room Bounding. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. NOTE When working with a linked file. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. roof. click to select it.rvt. not in the MEP training file. These components are defined in the architectural training file. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you add a level for plenums. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 1 In the Project Browser.

offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). The new level is placed. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level.MEP. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. and double-click West . and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. and click OK. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. 16 Press Esc. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). enter 8'. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view.6 In the Project Browser. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. Preparing Spaces | 47 . and enter Level 2 Plenum. Click Plan View Types. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. and in the Plan View Types dialog. For Offset. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. 9 On the Draw panel. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. NOTE After finishing each exercise. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. Under Extents. For Cut plane. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . In this exercise. 20 In the Project Browser. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. For View Classification. for View Scale. In the next exercise. for View Range. select Level Above (Level 3). verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. Under View Depth. and for Offset. for Level. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. and click Properties. and click Apply Default View Template. select Design. and then place spaces in various types of areas.Plenum. right-click Level 2 Plenum. ■ Click OK twice. right-click Level 2 Plenum. In this exercise.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. enter 0. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. for Default View Template. click Edit. you place spaces in areas of the building model. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. enter an Offset of 1' 0". you can choose to save your work. Under Identity Data. For Sub-Discipline. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. for Top. select MEP . it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. However. select Plenum Plan.

For Upper Limit. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. select Level 2 Plenum. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 0. This specifies the vertical extent of the space.Space Plan is highlighted. and ceilings). You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. click Training Files. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . walls. select New. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. For Offset. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. indicating that it’s the active view. Placing Spaces | 49 .rvt. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. For Space. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. For (Tag Location). 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. select Horizontal. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

Click OK. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. For Name. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. ensuring coordination between the files. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter Library. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . 9 Select the space.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum.7 Click to place the space. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. for Number. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. 14 In the drawing area. enter 219.

15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Placing Spaces | 51 . select Level 3. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 21 Using the method learned previously. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. and then click Modify. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. For Upper Limit. enter 0. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. For Offset.

you place a space in a large corridor area. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then split the space using a space separation line. 23 Click OK. under Energy Analysis. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes.

and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 On the Options Bar. for Upper Limit.rvt. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. select Level 3.Space Plan is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. and for Offset. enter 0. and then press Esc. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i.

as shown. double-click the space name. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 10 Using the same method. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. and press Enter. In the schedule. 9 In the floor plan. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. 11 Close the schedule view. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. which was numbered 219Q. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. and scroll to the newly placed space. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. the plan view would have updated with the changes. change the space number to 216A. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. enter Corridor.7 In the Project Browser. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number.

The new space is numbered correctly (216B). 18 Close the file with or without saving it. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. place a space in the lower area of the split space. 16 Using the method learned previously. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space.15 Press Esc twice.

Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty).Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise.Space Plan is highlighted. click Training Files. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. If necessary. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you place a space in a chase. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section.

13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. for Name. For Number. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. 10 In the plan view.4 Press Esc. expand Spaces. for Upper Limit. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select Interior and Reference. For Offset. 6 Enter VG. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. select Roof Level. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. For Limit Offset. 12 Click in the section view. enter 0. On the Options Bar. for Upper Limit. and then click OK. and click Element Properties. select Level 3. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. enter Chase. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. click in the chase area to place the space. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. enter 4'. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. right-click. In the plan view. select the space. Under Identity Data. enter 225PC. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view.

and maximize the view. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. and you placed spaces for various types of areas.Bounding elements (such as walls. under Loaded Tags. 17 Type ZF. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area.Space Plan. floors. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. All spaces in the view are tagged. 15 Press Esc. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and click OK. In the next exercises. select Space Tag With Volume. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. ceilings. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations.

Notice that Default is currently the only zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. click Reference. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . To display space reference lines. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. it is automatically added to the Default zone. click Training Files. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. which removes the space from the Default zone. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). indicating that it’s the active view. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. under Spaces.Zoning is highlighted. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. After a space is placed in an area.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. click View ➤ Zones. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

indicating that it’s the active view. select Occupiable. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. Using the Edit Zone tab. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and a new zone is created. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.rvt. and verify the zones in the System Browser. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. you assign spaces to zones in the building. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. The graphic in the System Browser updates. under Energy Analysis. click Reference. double-click 121 Cafeteria.5 In the System Browser. and Electrical 220 spaces. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. The Zone tool is active. the Edit Zone tab displays. and click OK. 4 In the drawing area. indicating that the space is occupiable. you can add or remove a space from the zone. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Zoning is highlighted. To display space reference lines. you assign spaces to a zone. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and modify the zone properties. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Instruction 221. under Spaces. Next. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. and click Finish Editing Zone. As you do this. select Computer Lab 222.

■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. Expand HVAC Zones. select HVAC Zones. you need to activate the zone visibility. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). Instruction. type VG. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 .In the System Browser. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). To view the zone in the drawing area. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. 5 With the drawing area active. Click OK.

NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. for Name. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. 9 In the System Browser. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). expand 2 . under Spaces. and verify the zone in the System Browser. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. under Identity Data.West . you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. click Finish Editing Zone. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. and click OK. To display space reference lines. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. In this exercise.Zoning is highlighted. click Reference.TIP After you finish editing the zone. 11 Close the System Browser.rvt. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. enter 2 .West . You activated zone visibility in the views.Zoning. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone.Area B. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.

13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected.Zoning view to activate it. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 15 Press Esc.Zoning view. zoom out. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.5 Click in the Level 1 .Zoning floor plan. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone.Zoning view. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. Verify that the distance is 1/2". Select Attached End. 9 With the Add Space tool active. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . 8 In the Level 1 . click in the Level 2 . and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone.

the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. you verify the building. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building.East. space. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes.Zoning view. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Front. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i.rvt. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . and zone information. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. for Name Value. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. double-click the zone tag. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. click the corner where the Top. In this exercise. on the ViewCube. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. enter Lounge . Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. 19 Close the file with or without saving it.Zoning to make it the active view. and click OK. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Level 1 . and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown.

The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. With 109 Lounge selected. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. you isolate the space. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 .4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. Next. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. verify that Wireframe is selected. and select 109 Lounge. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. Using the Highlight tool. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. click (Isolate). ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. Click (Highlight).

Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. select 1_South_Lounge. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. and then click OK. click . select 109 Lounge. verify that <Building> is selected. For People. and then click OK. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. click . and in the Electrical Loads dialog.■ On the Details tab. For Construction Type. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. Next. For Electrical Loads. and in the People dialog. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. scroll down in the left pane. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. select Lounge/Recreation. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. and click OK. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. ■ ■ ■ Next. the space information displays for the selected space. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click . Below the list of spaces and zones.

click (Shading). This indicates the cooling set point.00 °F : 54. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . verify that 74. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. This indicates the heating set point. the zone information displays for the selected zone. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. and humidification set point. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector.00 °F : 90. Below the list of spaces and zones. floors. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. cooling air temperature. and dehumidification set point. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. outdoor air per area. and other room-bounding components. and air changes per hour. heating air temperature.00 °F : N/A is specified. verify that <Building> is selected. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. This indicates the outdoor air per person. For Cooling Information. Next. verify that 70. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. For Heating Information.00 °F : N/A is specified. roofs. 12 Using the methods learned previously.

enter 212P. Because this is an unoccupied space. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Click OK. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. Under Energy Analysis. For Name. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. for Number. select Plenum. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. select Level 3. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. click Cancel. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). select Plenum. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. For Offset. open MEP . 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Under Energy Analysis. enter 0. 15 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area.

4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 26 Close the file with or without saving it.Space Plan. is selected. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. and verify that the space has replaced the void. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. under Energy Analysis. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. double-click Level 2 . verify that Manchester. and select space Plenum 212P. you verified building. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and zone information. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . click in the Value field. On the Place tab. click Edit. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. for Energy Data. NH. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. select School or University. click Training Files. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. For Location. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information.rvt. space. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In this exercise. for City. enter 03101. For Postal Code.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone.

8 In the drawing area. In order to select a space. verify that New Construction is selected. this option adjusts the times automatically. verify that <Building> is specified. and click OK. for Values. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and click OK. verify that Level 1 is selected. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. verify that 1' 0" is specified. ■ On the Weather tab. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. If. you need to select this option. click in the Value column. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. and click Element Properties. select Specified. Select Area per person. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. verify that Occupiable is selected. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. select Library . For Ground Plane. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. Click OK twice. both. For Sensible. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Audio Visual. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. For Space Type. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. For Project Phase. for Values. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). For Condition Type. For Latent. select space Library 219. and enter 50 sq. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. under Volume Computations.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. For People. and click OK. Under Heat Gain (per Person). right-click. For Building Construction. or neither. For Sliver Space Tolerance. for Building Service. enter 150 Btu/h. enter 200 Btu/h. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. and then click . select Specified. select Heated and cooled. a cooling load. click Edit. For Export Complexity. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. ft.

If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . You should correct the space error in the building model. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. click Edit. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. for Values. Click OK twice. select 219 Library. Under Power. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. NH. and under Heating Information. for Values. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. click Information).■ ■ ■ Click OK. select Actual. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. and click OK. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. There should be no warnings displayed. For Electrical Loads. For Building Construction. You have verified the building information. 12 Click the Details tab. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. For Building Service. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. verify that <Building> is specified. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. verify that School or University is selected. verify that Manchester. select Actual. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. Next. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. Select the space associated with the warning. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. and click to learn the cause for the warning. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. is specified. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. For Location. and can be modified here. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). click Calculate.

15 Review the loads report for project.Space Plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 17 In the loads report. click Training Files. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . In this exercise. 19 In the drawing area. 21 Click OK. For Color Scheme. and a loads report displays. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. click to the right of the building to place the legend. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise.rvt. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. indicating that it’s the active view. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. space. and zone information for the building model. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 16 After you review the loads report. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. under Energy Analysis. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 3 In the drawing area. weather. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. or zone information. select 219 Library. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. select HVAC Zones. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. space. Click OK. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. or make any changes to the model.

Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 .5 Zoom in to the legend. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. and click OK. under Schemes. in 1-ton increments. select Tonnage Range. select the color scheme legend. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. The new scheme displays in the view. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.

9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 11 Using the method learned previously. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser.

you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model.Space Fill is the active view. select New Construction. For Name. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. enter Space Airflow Schedule. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. select Spaces. Click OK. more category options are available.rvt. click Training Files. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. For Phase. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. for Select available fields from. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . In the next exercise. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. select Spaces. In this exercise. Select Schedule building components.12 Close the file with or without saving it. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

For Type. select Airflow Delta. select Air Flow. click (Browse). For Fields. and then click . In the Schedule Properties dialog. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Calculated Supply Airflow. select Not Between. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. In the Fields dialog. for Formula. and then click Conditional Format. For Discipline.■ Under Available fields. select Level. For Then by. select Number. ■ Click Calculated Value. Click OK. select Level. and click OK. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. select HVAC. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. For Formula. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the Calculated Value dialog. enter . the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. enter Airflow Delta. Select Ascending. and then select Hidden field. Select Formula. Header. and Blank line. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields.

you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. Click OK twice. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. In this exercise. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. ■ The schedule displays. select red. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. a view opens that contains the selected space. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. For Background Color. click the color swatch. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. Under Conditions to Use. right-click to access schedule properties. In the Color dialog. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project.■ ■ ■ For Value. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. and click OK. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. verify that Show is highlighted. In later exercises. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. In the next lesson.

78 .

After completing the air systems lesson. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. After system creation. you will create supply air systems. you modify air terminal parameters. In this lesson. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. As you place the air terminals. 79 . you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. Then.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. and work with the airflow schedule.

click Training Files.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . and scroll to space 223. the space crossing lines display. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 3 In the ceiling view. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . When you highlight a space using the cursor. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. indicating that it’s the active view. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i.

and then press Esc to end the command.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. The schedule updates with the new flow data. type 12. and press Enter. for Flow. which in this case is the ceiling grid. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. and press Enter. 17 Move the cursor down.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. the hosted elements are updated as well. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. 13 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Options Bar.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. select the diffuser. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. enter 425 CFM. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 9 On the Placement panel. click Place on Face. Also. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. and select Supply Diffuser . Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . and then select both Copy and Multiple. as shown. If the host element is modified or moved.Rectangular Face Round Neck . Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. verify that Constrain is cleared.

If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. 27 Select Return Diffuser . notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines.rfa. and then press Esc. 22 In the drawing area. As you place the return diffusers. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 24 In the Open dialog. select one of the diffusers.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Next. click Yes. clear Leader. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. 25 In the drawing area. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. 21 On the Options Bar. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. 29 Place 2 diffusers. 28 On the Placement tab. as shown.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. click Place on Face. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and click Open.

34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. 31 In the alert dialog.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. and click to select the lines. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. Level. as shown. click Yes. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. and click OK. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . select one of the return diffusers. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 32 In the Project Browser. select Strong Reference. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. under Other. for Reference.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . enter 9' 0"2750. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. For the start point. click the Level 1 line. for Constraints ➤ Offset. 44 Zoom in to space 115. ■ ■ For the end point.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click OK.

physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . the space crossing lines display. and click View ➤ Systems. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. 45 Close the file with or without saving it.HVAC Plan . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i.Press Esc. click Training Files. right-click the title. You then create the logical connection between the system components.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. After creating the logical connection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. However. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. including energy analysis. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. When you highlight a space. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.rvt. In this exercise. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment.Design is highlighted. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment.

These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. 11 In the drawing area. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. review the Number of Elements. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. 6 Keep the System Browser open. Connect Into. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. As you add diffusers to systems. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. 15 Click Cancel. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. and Flow value. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. On the Options Bar. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. 12 In the System Browser. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. the number of elements is updated. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. System Name. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.IMPORTANT In the System Browser.

This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. In this exercise. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. under Identity Data. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. for Mark. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). the air terminals are the children.17 Using the method learned previously. and the system connects them. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . which updates the name in the System Browser. Rename the system Next. In this exercise. for System Name. 26 Click Finish Editing System. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. 18 Click OK. 22 Click OK. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. 25 Click OK. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. under Mechanical.

6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. the Network type provides several solutions. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 .HVAC Plan. and display solution 1. for Solution Type. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. When you highlight a space using the cursor.rvt. click Training Files. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. select the upper left diffuser.Design is highlighted. A Generate Layout tab displays.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. indicating that it’s the active view. In this case.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Also. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . which provides various layout tools. 5 On the Options Bar. the space crossing lines display. select Network. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 4 In the drawing area. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch).

96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. For Offset. as shown. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. For Duct Type. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. click Modify. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. enter 3'. you’ll get an error in a later step. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . For Flex Duct Type. Click OK. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. For Offset. Select Branch. enter 9' 10 1/2". select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct.7 On the Options Bar. For Duct Type. click Settings.Round. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. enter 9' 10 1/2". 9 On the Generate Layout panel.

or offset elevations are incorrect. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created.11 Click Finish Layout. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. Either relocate the system components. For example. select a different layout solution. or manually modify the duct. as is the elbow itself. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification.

and then click OK. highlight a segment of the main duct. select Duct Color Fill .Flow.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. If the entire network does not highlight. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. and equipment. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. for Values Displayed. under Graphics. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. Usually. for Color Scheme. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. but not all values are used in this view. a disconnection exists. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. Using a flow-based color scheme. select By View. and click to select it. thus it is not part of the system. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. and click OK. The first time you press Tab. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. fittings. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend.

Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 26 Click OK. select the color scheme legend. under Mechanical . and then press Esc to clear the selection. for Flow. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. and press Enter. 20 In the drawing area. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select the WSHP. select Duct Color Fill .Velocity. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM).The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. select one of the diffusers in the system. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. for Schemes. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog.Airflow. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change.

select Friction.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. The ductwork and fittings are updated. for Branch Sizing. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Select Restrict Height. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. and select 16". If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. and drag it to the right. click Cancel. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select Calculated Size Only. Click OK. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). Select Only. and then click to select it. highlight a segment of the duct. and enter . Under Constraints. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog.08 in-wg/100ft. Select the upper segment of main duct. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it.

Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . pressure. static pressure. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. and pressure loss. Using this tool. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. Use the information that displays (flow. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection).

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i.NOTE As you inspect a system. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system.rvt. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. also known as the critical path. 35 Click Finish.

Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers.HVAC Plan .Design is highlighted. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . and click Draw Duct. and click to specify the end of the main duct. and select the WSHP. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct.

The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. for Offset. 14 In the Project Browser. select 9' 10 1/2". Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. click the corner where the Top. select the top right diffuser. right-click the connector grip. and click Draw Duct.3D MEP. 15 On the ViewCube. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 11 On the Options Bar. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. NOTE When drawing duct. double-click MEP . Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. Front.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 .

16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). the color fill indicates the flow value. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. 22 Using the same method. in space 115. 19 In the drawing area. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . it is considered a closed loop. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. The ductwork is automatically created. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. Also.

and select the top left diffuser. 25 Press Esc. zoom in to the open end of the main duct.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. You can ignore the warning. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 24 Select the remaining diffusers. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct.

32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 30 Press Esc twice. and click to select it. and then click Modify. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view.

36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space.Airflow. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. under Constraints. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . for Flow. such as a plenum. and then click OK. 40 Using the same method. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. and click OK. under Mechanical . clear Restrict Height. select a segment of the main duct. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection.

You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. Then. In this lesson. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. including 2 base mounted pumps. and a cooling tower located on the roof. Automatically and manually lay out piping. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Create return and supply piping systems. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. 109 .

click Training Files.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. you place mechanical equipment. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. on level 3 of the building model. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler.

NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. and select WSHP .Left Return . in corridor 328.Horizontal . 7 On the Options Bar. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Wall faces is selected.2-6 Tons . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.High Efficiency . indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 .HVAC Plan .Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down.Design is highlighted. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. as shown.

click the top edge of the WSHP. and in the Type Selector. as shown. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. verify that the WSHP is still selected. and enter 2'. and click to place the dimension. as shown. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first.8 Click the corridor wall face. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. 10 Select the WSHP. click the dimension.

enter 12 GPM. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection.14 Click Modify. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. for Water Flow. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. Under Mechanical. as shown. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 9'. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. select the 2 WSHPs. for Offset. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Click OK. and click to place it in the mechanical room.

This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. including flow and pressure. you create the return and supply piping systems.21 Click Modify. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Create the logical connection between the system components. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components.

You can create pipes to connect system components. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . click Training Files.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click View ➤ Piping. but without a corresponding system.HVAC Plan . indicating that it’s the active view. right-click the Systems column heading. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 5 In the System Browser. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. where it is easier to review the information. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser.Mech 330). analyses cannot be performed.rvt. Unlike logical connections (systems). Creating a Piping System | 115 .Design is highlighted. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window.

while pressing Ctrl. for System Name. select the boiler. select the 2 WSHPs. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 10 On the Options Bar. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return.In the System Browser. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Assigning a system component to an existing system. 12 In the drawing area. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. and the Edit System tool is not active. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. Therefore. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. Notice that on the Options Bar. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. As you assign equipment to systems. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. This display indicates that the system is selected. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment.

13 Click Finish Editing System. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. You have created the hydronic return system.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 19 In the Project Browser. Creating a Piping System | 117 . 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. and select the cooling tower. 17 On the Options Bar. under Design ➤ HVAC . for System Name. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.HVAC Plan . enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously.Design. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. double-click Roof . Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it.

expand the Hydronic Return system category. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). 25 Select the boiler. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. and bypasses the cooling tower. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. 26 Click Finish Editing System. and click Select. 28 Using the same method. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). indicating the logical connection. 23 Close the roof plan view. In heating mode. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. and click Expand All. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. and click OK.22 In the Select Connector dialog. 29 Right-click CHWS. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. In cooling mode. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment.

and click OK. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. enter 18 GPM. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. and click OK. under Mechanical. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. and click Column Settings. expand Piping.In the System Browser. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Water Flow. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. and click Properties. you can view several parameters. 32 In the System Browser. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. including the flow rate and size of the component. You also manually modify the layout path as required.

you can place the cursor over a system component.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. When you draw a box to select components. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). A system preview displays in red. click Check None. indicating that it’s the active view. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. 5 In the Filter dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . select Mechanical Equipment. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing.rvt. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. press Tab to highlight the system. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. and click to select it. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser.Mech 330). 9 In the Select a System dialog. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . 6 Press Esc to clear the selection.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . then the Select a System dialog displays. click Training Files. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. the boiler.Design is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click OK. select CHWR. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 10 Click OK.HVAC Plan .

This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. click Settings. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . select Perimeter. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. duct. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. It does not reference the architecture.11 On the Options Bar. For Inset. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. 13 Click Cancel. verify that Solutions is selected. enter 1' 6''. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. or architectural components. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. structural beams. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog.

click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 17 Optionally. the flow for one WSHP is 18. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. With each Tab. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment.16 Click Finish Layout. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. 19 In the drawing area. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. and press Tab 3 times. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Verify the flow In a previous exercise. to display the path with thinner lines. and the flow for the other is 12.

The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. under Mechanical. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 24 Press Esc. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. 23 Under Mechanical. and access its instance properties. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. 22 Select the boiler. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK. and click OK.

Next. click Edit System. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 27 On the System Tools panel. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 32 Click Finish Editing System. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. 28 In the Project Browser.Design. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. double-click Level 1 . and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . On the Options Bar.HVAC Plan . the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . the Number of Elements is now 8. which propagates flow throughout the system. you physically close the CHWR loop.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Logically.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.

and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. and click Cancel. access its instance properties. select a WSHP. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. under Mechanical. 38 Using the same method. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. 35 Using the drag control. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. as shown. and then close the Instance Properties dialog.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap.

44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. Click Settings. For Slope. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. and then click OK. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . For Inset. 41 Click OK. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove.40 In the Select a System dialog. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. enter 1' 6''. select CHWS. select Perimeter 1 of 5. enter 0''/12''.

as shown. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). as shown. 47 In the drawing area. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. 48 While pressing Ctrl.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. 46 Click Modify. In a later exercise. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. (Both sections are at the same elevation.

Either relocate the system components. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. 51 Click Finish Layout. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. select a different layout solution. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. Add piping to close the supply loop. To create the piping system.50 Using the same method. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. or manually modify the pipe. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). or offset elevations are incorrect. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping.

indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ 3D Views. as shown.rvt.HVAC Plan . and the return pipes are magenta. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D.Design is highlighted. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. click Training Files. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. As you work in the training file. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . double-click 3D HVAC Building. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC .

7 In the plan view. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. select the section of piping. as shown.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 6 Press Delete.

10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 .8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. ■ Click to move the piping. Click to specify the reference point. 9 In the 3D view. and press Esc to clear the selection. select the boiler. ■ Move the cursor up 4''.

The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). 11 In the Select Connector dialog. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. and click Draw Pipe.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. select the return pipe riser. and the lower one is secondary. 13 In the plan view. and click OK. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. 12 In the 3D view. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. The connections are automatically created. select the boiler. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful.

and press Enter. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. enter 2'. for Offset. and you select 1 connector.7''. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. ■ Move the cursor down. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. enter 1' . 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 .In a plan view.

19 In the plan view. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the primary base mounted pump. and select it. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. and click OK. as shown. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. As you place piping runs that are close together. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. and the appropriate fittings are created. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 18 Press Esc twice. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down.

zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. click to connect to the pump. 29 If necessary. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. 28 Press Esc.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. right-click the bottom connector. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. and when the connector point displays. and click Draw Pipe. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. and click to draw the pipe. 27 Move the cursor to the right. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . and click the minus symbol. you select the tee fitting.

33 Press Esc. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . enter 4'. 31 On the Options Bar. right-click the discharge connector.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. and click to create the pipe. and click Draw Pipe. select the primary base mounted pump. for Offset.

zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. 35 Using the method learned previously.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. these pipe connections were created automatically. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. as shown. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector.

for Offset. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . right-click the bottom control on the tee.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click to create the pipe. and click Draw Pipe. type 1'. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. enter 9' 6''. and press Enter. ■ Move the cursor down.

You now have a closed loop system. and click Element Properties. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . Next.37 Click Modify. right-click. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. you validate the flow through the system. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe.

The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. In the Instance Properties dialog. The flow is being propagated through the piping. 40 Click Cancel. under Mechanical. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. for Cooling Water Flow. view the properties for the secondary pump. 48 In the plan view. the value is 0 GPM. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. 42 Click OK. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is .50 or 50% of the Flow. notice that under Mechanical. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). right-click. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). 41 Using the same method. 43 Press Esc. as shown.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. select the cooling tower. under Mechanical. Connect the cooling tower Next. 46 Press Esc. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 44 In the 3D view. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. and click Element Properties. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. and click OK. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. When you create the pumps in parallel.

49 Press Esc. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 .■ Lower pipe (outlet). Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters.

the water bypasses the cooling tower. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.50 In the 3D View. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. select the cooling tower. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. Adding Valves In this exercise. click Training Files. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. and close the dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. When the valve is open. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. and is heated by the boiler.rvt.

and select Ball Valve . verify that the Diameter value is 3''. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. indicating that it’s the active view. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. Adding Valves | 143 .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Press Esc twice. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 4 On the Options Bar. The bypass valve is closed by default. as shown. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position.HVAC Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design is highlighted.

144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 12 Select Ball Valve . 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. place another Ball Valve .10 Press Esc. parallel to the previously placed valve. 14 Using the same method.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down.

Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. and select Ball Valve . 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. 20 Select the bypass valve. and click OK. Adding Valves | 145 . For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). and click Element Properties. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. under Mechanical. 19 Using the same method. In heating mode. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). and select Ball Valve . verify that Flow is 0 GPM.

The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design is highlighted. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. click Training Files. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system.22 Using the method you just learned. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. indicating that it’s the active view. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. Initially. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. as shown.HVAC Plan .rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .

This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend.Flow. click Pipe Color Fill . for Schemes. and click OK. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. Sizing Pipe | 147 . and click OK. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.Size. select Pipe Color Fill .

Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. enter 5 FPS. Select And. for Branch Sizing. 13 Press Esc. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. and for Velocity. select Friction. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Under Constraints.25 FT/100ft. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). select Larger of Connector and Calculated. and click to select the branch. Click OK. and enter 2. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing.

Inspecting the System In this exercise. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. or manually modify the pipe. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. click Training Files. Either relocate the system components. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i.Design ➤ 3D Views. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. or offset elevations are incorrect. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. pressure. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. Inspecting the System | 149 . Using the System Inspector. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. select a different layout solution.

NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. and pressure information including pressure loss. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. as required. An inspection flag reports the section number.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. This information helps you modify the system design. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). flow. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly.

targeting those systems that need attention.88 psi.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. 10 Click Finish. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. the Static Pressure is 7.67 psi. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. select 90° F. and to size pipe. as shown. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . 9 Using the same method. and click OK. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. In this exercise.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. and the Pressure Loss is 1. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open.89 psi. inspect Section 6 again. for Fluid Temperature. you need to validate them.

After you have assigned all components to systems. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. If you place components without assigning them to a system. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors).Design. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. click Training Files. In the System Browser. and click View. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected.rvt. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed.HVAC Plan . Warnings display. 4 In the System Browser. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. right-click the Systems titlebar. 9 Right-click CHWS. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. 6 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 3 . You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. and click Show to view all of the system components. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 .Design.Design ➤ Floor Plans. After you assign components to a system.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 7 In the System Browser. the pipe is associated with that system. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. and for pipe sizing. thus assigning the components to a system. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection.HVAC Plan . For example. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. As you learned when placing components. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components.Design floor plan. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. 13 Right-click CHWR.HVAC Plan . You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. and click Expand All. 14 Using the methods that you learned. click Close. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. 12 In the System Browser. and confirm unassigned system components. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. expand the Unassigned folder.TIP If you have multiple views open. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. otherwise. right-click Hydronic Return. and select Level 3 . 10 Using the same methods.

154 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. 155 .

156 .

Define required lighting. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings.

Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. select Copper. Click OK. enter 1. speeding up the design phase. enter THHN. Select Correction Factor. select Copper. ■ Click New Correction Factor. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. and demand factors that are applied in the design.rvt. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Wiring Types. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . wiring. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. click Training Files. As you place components and create circuits. select 90.Wire Sizes. For Temperature. ■ ■ For Material. In this exercise you review electrical settings. ■ ■ For Factor.04. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Wiring . distribution systems. select 75. You also add a wiring type. For Material. For Temperature Rating. click (Open).

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

■ ■ For Value. Click OK three times. select Red. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . enter -5 fc and 5 fc. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. Click Background Color. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. for Custom Colors. ■ ■ In the Color dialog.

Balance wire sizes and breaker service. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. as you place lighting fixtures. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. Create power loads. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. power circuits. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. 167 . Use the System Browser to check your design. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. Then. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. First. Create a panel schedule. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components.

6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. select Average Estimated Illumination.00 fc. click Training Files. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i.00 fc. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click (Open). 2 In the drawing area. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. Under Scheme Definition. select the color for Less Than 20.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. By using orange as the color for this range. select the color legend.rvt. for Basic Colors. for the Spaces Category. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. You can create additional color schemes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. select Orange. In the Color dialog.Lighting Color Fill view is open. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.

The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 .5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. 8 In the Project Browser.Lighting Ceiling plan. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. zoom to space Library 219. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. 13 Click the Level 2 .Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area.7 In the Project Browser.5 fc range is satisfied. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.5 fc range. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view.277. The red field will clear once the +/. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. which is the lowest value in the specified range. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. indicating a value greater than 0 fc.

26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 23 Click OK. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Multiple. the fixtures will move accordingly. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 25 On the Options Bar. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 20 Select the lighting fixture. 18 Click to place the fixture. In the Space Lighting Analysis view.

29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select the 3 fixtures.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. select Multiple. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 30 On the Options Bar. 28 In the drawing area. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically. Note the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window.

and for Category.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.277V. select Lighting Fixtures. click Check None. Click OK. 36 In the Filter dialog. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) .

38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.The values in the schedule are updated automatically. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . select Multiple Alignment. The lighting delta is satisfied. 41 On the Options Bar. Note the changes for the space Library 219.277V. click the ceiling grid line as shown.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . 42 In the drawing area.

44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. The fixture aligns. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

46 Close the file with or without saving it. click (Open). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise.rvt. you modify the light fixture IES files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures.45 Press ESC to end the command. click Training Files. In the next exercise.

3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 .Lighting Plan.Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Tile the views as shown. scroll to view space space Library 219. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 .Lighting Color Fill plan.

Under Photometrics. click the value for Initial Color. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . click the value for Light Loss Factor. for Color Preset. enter 162. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . In the Select File dialog.00 VA. Under Photometrics. select T5 [HO]. Under Electrical. ■ Click Apply. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. enter .85. select 463T5_S. select Luminous Flux. Click OK. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse.93. for Ballast Loss Factor. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. enter . and click OK. click the value for Initial Intensity.00 lm. for Lamp. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. Under Photometrics. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads.ies and click Open. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. ■ Under Photometrics. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog.277V and click OK. ■ Click OK twice. select Xenon and click OK. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. specify 15000. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. for Type Mark. for Apparent Load. enter F15. In the Name dialog. Under Identity Data.

Click OK.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and for Category.277V. click Check None. select Lighting Fixtures. 10 In the Filter dialog. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures.

Press Delete. Note the lighting delta updates again. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. 15 In space Library 219. select the top center fixture.

17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again.

and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. In the next exercise. click Training Files. junction boxes. Junction Boxes.Press Delete. you add switches. Placing Switches. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. zoom to space Computer Lab 222.rvt. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. and receptacles to your design. and Receptacles | 183 . click (Open). Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 2 In the drawing area. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 7 Click to place the switch. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.277V.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor .

11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 12 In the Load Family dialog. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 185 . Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. 9 Press ESC to end the command. The element type Junction Boxes .8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown.NoLoad. Placing Switches. Select Junction Boxes .rfa and click Open.

Click Edit Type. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power .Offset.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. enter 9’0”. enter JB-1NL. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. 21 In the drawing area. zoom to space Library 219. for Level 2 . NOTE When entering values. Under Electrical. 15 Select the junction box. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. note the Number of Poles is 1. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.14 Press ESC to end the command. for Mark. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Click OK twice. In the Type Properties dialog.

26 In the System Browser. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Placing Switches. Select Size. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and Voltage. 23 In the System Browser. 24 For any column. Junction Boxes. right-click and click Column Settings. Expand Electrical. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Click OK. Space Number. Select Load. Space Name. Expand General. and Receptacles | 187 . and Number of Elements. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. NOTE If necessary. Distribution System.

Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 31 Close the System Browser. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown.

39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 189 . Placing Switches.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. select Copy and Multiple. 38 Select the receptacle. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. 40 On the Options Bar.

enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 42 Move the cursor down. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and enter 12’ and press ENTER. move the cursor along the wall.41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle.

and Receptacles | 191 .43 Press ESC to end the command. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes.

47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.

you need to create logical connections to define the topology.48 Close the file with or without saving it. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.

You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. click (Open). and work toward the higher voltage. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. zoom to the space Electrical 220. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 2 In the drawing area.equipment. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). Adding wiring to a project is optional.rvt. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click Training Files.

enter 20. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . Click OK. select 480/277 Wye. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard.Loads. for Distribution System. select 120/208 Wye.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 15 On the Options Bar. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. for Distribution System. For Panel Name. 7 Press ESC to end the command. 8 Select the panelboard. 14 Select the panelboard. enter PP-2B. for Max. 9 On the Options Bar. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Surface: 100A.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . #1 Pole Breakers. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 .

Click OK. enter 20. for Max. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. which is the logical connection between the elements. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures.Loads. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. 20 In the drawing area. zoom to space Instruction 221. click Check None. enter LP-2B. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. #1 Pole Breakers. For Panel Name. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 23 In the Filter dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. and for Category. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. Click OK.

26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 .

198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 33 Select the switch on the right.28 Press ESC to end the command. 32 Press ESC. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown.

35 Select the left three-way switch. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit.34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down.

200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and for Category. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. Next you create circuits without showing wire. Click OK. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . click Check None. select Wires. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. 38 Press ESC to end the command. click (Open). 41 In the Filter dialog. enter 2.Loads. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. except without wire. for Hot Conductors. Click OK.

and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. ■ 16 In the System Browser. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 2 In the drawing area. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Rating. expand Power. Distribution System. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. right-click on the Systems heading. Voltage. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. and Voltage Drop are selected. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing.rvt. Click OK. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . 13 In the System Browser. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. click Training Files. and verify that Load. and then expand circuit 1. Expand Electrical.

20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 22 With the junction box still selected. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Click OK. 30 Close the System Browser. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . under Electrical. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. change the Voltage to 277V. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. zoom to space Computer Lab 222.

Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. under Identity Data. note the label parameters and click Cancel. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. click below the first one to place it. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click Yes. Click Tags. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. click Edit Type. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. Click OK. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 40 Click OK twice. for Type Mark. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. enter FR4. 47 In the drawing area. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader.

Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. Next you create a switch system. select Lighting Fixture Tags. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. enter a comma. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 52 In the Save As dialog. for File Name. Click OK. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. 56 In the Filter dialog. Deselect Break and for Suffix. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. Click Save. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. Click OK. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. and click Apply. For Circuit Number. select Break. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . click Check None. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. and for Category. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. Click OK. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .rfa.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. for Switch ID. under Electrical Lighting. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. enter a. 2 In the drawing area. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. Click OK. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i.rvt. click Training Files. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. click (Open).

19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. for switch ID. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. Click OK. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. enter b.Lighting. under Electrical . 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures.

Click OK. select the PP-2B panel. and data systems. click Training Files. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. Circuits are used for power. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.rvt.26 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Check None. 2 In the drawing area. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. select Electrical Fixtures. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and for Category. click (Open). Creating Power Loads | 207 . 7 In space Electrical 220. Next you create a circuit and size wire. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 4 In the Filter dialog. lighting.

and click Element Properties. for Hot Conductors.Loads.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. and in the drawing area. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. select Wiring. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. Click OK. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. and click Open. 13 Select the wire again. under Electrical . select Hook Wire Tick Mark. select Long Wire Tick Mark. 19 Click OK. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. and in the right pane. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter 2. 15 In the Load Family dialog. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog.rfa. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family.

as shown. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. and click to select the circuit. 22 In space Electrical 220. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. Creating Power Loads | 209 .The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. select the PP-2B panel.

28 In the drawing area. 29 In space Instruction 221. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . as shown. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. click the connector of the first receptacle. in space Instruction 221. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc.26 Press Delete.

you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. click Open. click Training Files.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . Next you balance the loads for your design. 3 In the Electrical space. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 2 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. zoom to space Electrical 220. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. select panel LP-2B.rvt. Finally. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source.

and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. and Phase C . B. 12 Select panel PP-2B. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B.3712 VA. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. click Rebalance Loads. 1-#12. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. for Rating. 1-#10. Click OK. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. Phase B 3636 VA. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. 1-#12. Notice that the loads on Phase A. enter 30A.3616 VA). Scroll down. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. 6 Click OK. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 14 Close the warning dialog. Under Electrical-Loads. 1-#10. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A .

click (Open). and click OK. for Rating. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel.Loads. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. and click OK. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. under Electrical . click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. for Rating. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 .15 Select panel PP-2B. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. click Training Files. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. enter 25A. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. under Electrical . Select PP-2B. Next you create a panel schedule.Loads. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. Click OK. 17 Close the warning dialog. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected.rvt. enter 30A. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule.

and open E601 . 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. click Edit. select Bold and Italic. 4 Close the report. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. for Font. 5 In the Project Browser. enter 3/32. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 7 Select the schedule.rvt. for Appearance. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog.Panel Schedules. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. 11 Click OK twice. enter 1/8. click (Open). Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. click Training Files. under Other. for Font Size. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. Under Header Text. 6 In the Project Browser. Under Header Text. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. for Font Size. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. expand Sheets (all). You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. select Berlin Sans FB. Under Body Text. 12 Close the file with or without saving it.

note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. In the System Browser. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. press TAB once. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. select space Lounge 212. In the System Browser.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. Checking Your Design | 215 . Expand Unassigned. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. each with a load of 180VA.

22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. zoom to space Electrical 214. 17 In the drawing area. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. select MDP-1. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. for Panel. under Warnings. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 18 Select panel LP-2C. 15 In the dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 16 Close the details dialog.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 .

218 .

Adding a pipe size.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 4 In the Name dialog.Design is open. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. In this lesson. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. and click Properties. planning is critical to a successful design. type PVC . you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. in addition to loading existing families. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 219 .Plumbing Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. click Training Files. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. and verify that Level 1 . click Duplicate. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. and click OK. 2 In the Project Browser.rvt. In this exercise.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. right-click PVC . Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser.Vent. you create a PVC pipe type.Sanitary.

DWV: Standard. enter 1/2''.DWV: Standard. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. 18 For System Type. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Plastic.rfa. enter 27/32''. and click Main.Vent is listed. 13 In the right panel. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.PVC . select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. enter 10°. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . Cross. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. 26 Click OK. select Sanitary. Tap. under Mechanical. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. enter 5/8''.PVC . under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . select Branch. 25 For Outside. In the Project Browser. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. PVC . 28 Close the file with or without saving it. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary.Sch 40 . enter -4' . 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.0''. and click OK. select Sanitary.Sch 40 . 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. 24 For Inside Diameter. for Nominal.DWV. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. 15 For System Type.Sch 40 . click Modify.PVC . 10 On the Selection panel. select Tee Vent . 27 For the new pipe size. Tee. For Offset. 17 In the left pane. 22 Click New Size. select Tee. for Material. 6 Click OK. click Pipe Settings.5 In the Type Properties dialog. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. click Training Files. under Pipe Types. 21 In the right pane. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. select None. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog.

including plumbing fixtures. 221 . and hot and cold water piping. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. Create the hot water system. sanitary piping. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. Create the sanitary plumbing system. Create the cold water system. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. add a hot water heater. vent. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 urinal. NOTE To identify a space name and number. you add 2 toilets.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. including the men’s room (space Male 107). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and verify that Level 1 .Design is open. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.Plumbing Plan . move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. click Training Files.

Flush Valve .6 gpf. and 3 sinks.Wall Mounted. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . centered on the bottom horizontal reference line. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components. against the left wall. under Water Closet . as shown. select Public . 5 On the Placement panel. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. in the Type Selector.1.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. 1 wall-mounted urinal. 4 On the Element panel.

(Again. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line.Wall Hung.7 Click to place another toilet.) 8 Press Esc. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. under Urinal . Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector. use the reference line to center the fixture. zoom in closer. above the first in the standard toilet space. and press Esc. select 3/4'' Flush Valve.

In placing the fixture. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . select 5''x5'' Strainer .Rectangular.2'' Drain. 12 On the Placement panel. under Floor Drain . 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). click Place on Face.Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 14 Click Modify.

19 Expand Default Sanitary. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. a urinal. In this exercise.rvt. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. and review the components listed under this system. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and click View ➤ Piping. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. click Training Files. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. right-click in the System Browser table heading. and a floor drain. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and Default Domestic Cold Water.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.

starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. and verify that Level 1 . verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and click OK. 2 In the Project Browser. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 6 In the plan view. 8 In the Filter dialog.Plumbing Plan . draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. Only plumbing fixtures are selected. clear Lines (<Overhead>).Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views.Design is open. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen.

You include the bathroom space number in the name. 11 On the Options Bar. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. expand Sanitary. so the Create Sanitary System is available. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. for System Name. 12 On the Edit System panel. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. 13 In the Systems Browser. If you deselected the drain. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. enter Sanitary 107.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. click Finish Editing System. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system.

16 In the Select a System dialog. as shown. select Sanitary 107. select one of the components in the system.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. a toilet. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. for example. at the midpoint of the detail lines. A preview of the piping layout displays. and click OK. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . The base is placed.

enter -1' 0''. 26 On the Options Bar. select Branch. select Intersections. for Slope. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. click Solutions. select 4''. and click OK. 21 On Options Bar. 27 Click Modify. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. for Offset. select Main. You accept this suggested solution. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. The default settings are automatically modified. 25 On the Options Bar. 23 For Offset. and for Offset. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. enter 1/8'' / 12''. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for Solution Type. enter -1' 0''. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. 24 In the left pane.19 On the Options Bar. and modify it to meet project requirements. and click Settings. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. enter -4'-0”. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. for Diameter.

29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. select the vertical route path segments.Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl.

31 Click Modify. as shown. as shown. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .30 In the 3D view. use the ViewCube to orient the view. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets.

Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .33 Using the previous method. click Finish Layout. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. 34 On the Generate Layout panel.

■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. select the fitting and click to reorient it. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. When a fitting is reversed.

37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. you continue with the work from the last exercise. adding sinks in the men’s room. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. 38 Close the file with or without saving it. and check the slope control. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . as shown. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system.

4 On the Element panel. under Lavatory . 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown.Design is open. select 22''x22'' . in the Type Selector. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i. 5 On the Placement panel. and verify that Level 1 . 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Public. click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans.rvt. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.Plumbing Plan .Rectangular.

Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches.7 Click Modify. and press Enter to create a second sink. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. enter 2' 4''. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. On the Options Bar. For example. select Multiple. TIP When entering dimensions. 8 Select the sink.

expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. click Finish Editing System.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. click Add To System. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 15 Click the 3 sinks. 11 In the System Browser. Press Esc. 12 In the drawing area. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 16 On the Edit System panel. and press Enter to create the third sink.

under Design ➤ Plumbing . 22 In the plan view. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. as shown. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. 20 Select the fitting. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. double-click 3D Plumbing. 21 Select the tee. and click Draw Pipe. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ 3D Views. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . with the tee fitting selected.In the System Browser. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 19 In the 3D view. use the ViewCube to orient the view. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector).

and click Apply. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. press Spacebar. 26 On the Options Bar. enter 2' .23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. enter 1/8'' / 12''. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. and click to draw the pipe. 24 On the Options Bar. for Slope. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . In this example.6''. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. When you press the Spacebar. 27 Click Modify. for Offset.

3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. click to place the fitting.DWV. select Standard.PVC .Sch 40 . 30 In the 3D view. 31 Click Modify. 29 In the Type Selector. 32 Select the double wye fitting. under Wye 45 Deg Double . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . move the cursor over the stub pipe. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. and when the vertical center line displays.

In the next steps. 36 In the section view.33 With the fitting selected. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. zoom in to the double wye fitting. right-click the right connector. and click Draw Pipe. 37 Select the fitting. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. enter 6''. and press Enter. 34 Press Esc. double-click the section head to open the section view. you add pipe segments to the double wye. on the Options Bar. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. enter 1'. and press Enter. for Offset.

draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. 42 Click Modify. and click to place the pipe. 41 Using the same method.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. 40 Click Modify.

draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. enter 6''. and press Esc. 47 Move the cursor down. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the bottom connector. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . press Spacebar.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. 48 Click Modify. 49 Using the same method. 46 In the section view.

and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. select the P-Trap on the left.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. 53 Using the same method. 56 Using the same method.PVC . under Trap P . You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. 54 Click Modify. 51 In the Type Selector.DWV. 55 In the 3D view. 52 In the plan view. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. select Standard. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks.Sch 40 . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 .

. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. and press Enter. Click in the plan view. and click Draw Pipe. Move the cursor to the left. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. enter 6''. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . connect the right sink to the double wye. Select the double wye pipe on the left. In the plan view. select the left P-Trap. Click Modify.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. 58 Using the same method.

under Pipe Types. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. while pressing Ctrl. click Finish to select the recommended solution. select the section of pipe you just drew. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. and select a proposed solution. On the Routing Solutions panel. as shown. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. while pressing Ctrl. Press Esc. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks.■ In the 3D view. In the Type Selector. select PVC Sanitary. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 .

62 On the Options Bar. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. for Slope. click Training Files. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. click Finish. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. adjusting the sanitary stack.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and verify the slope. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

and click the intersection to place the fitting. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 7 On the Selection panel.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser.Sch 40 . right-click the top connector. 9 In the Type Selector. and click to draw the pipe. select Standard. as shown.Floor level line. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee.Overall. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. select the vertical stack. 5 Select the tee. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend .Plumbing Plan .PVC . and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 10 In the 3D view. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . 3 In the Section view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . click Modify. and click Draw Pipe.Design. select the elbow fitting on the right.DWV. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 18 In the plan view. 15 Press Esc. select Standard. 14 On the Options Bar.DWV.11 Click Modify. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. enter 1'-0”. as shown. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 13 Click the rotate control once. and click the rotate control to change the orientation. for Offset. 12 Select the fitting. 17 In the Type Selector. under Plug .Sch 40 .PVC .

The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise.Plumbing Plan . and verify that Level 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. click Training Files.Design is open. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 20 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.19 Click Modify. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser.

15 In the plan view. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. double-click 3D Plumbing . 6 In the left pane. For Offset. 9 In the left pane. and click OK. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. select Domestic Hot Water. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 4 In the right pane. select Domestic Cold Water. if necessary. expand Unassigned. enter 9' 3''. 7 In the left pane.Design ➤ 3D Views. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. select Domestic Hot Water. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. select Pipe Types: Water. select Main. and sinks. select Plumbing Fixtures. for System Type. verify that the value is 9' 0''.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. select Branch. click Check None. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 14 In the System Browser. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. select Pipe Types: Water. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Overall. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. For Offset.) 10 Click OK. for System Type. urinal. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. draw a selection box to select the toilets. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. and for System Type. 17 In the Filter dialog. under Design ➤ Plumbing . select Branch. and click Main. minimize the Sanitary system.

Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. In the System Browser. For Flow Conversion Method. enter DCW 107. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. 19 On the System Tools panel. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. click Edit System. click Finish Editing System. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 21 On the Edit System panel. Notice that the water main displays in blue.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water.

29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. 34 In the plan view. 35 In the Type Selector. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. enter 10'. 33 Click Modify. select 3/4''. and click the connector. select the sink above the urinal. 32 Move the cursor to the right. at the intersection of the water main pipe. 30 In the plan view. select Water. under Pipe Types. 31 On the Options Bar. enter 3' . 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown. enter 4'0”.2 7/8''. right-click the top DCW connector. for Offset. 37 On the Options Bar. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. for Offset. and click Draw Pipe. enter 7''. and click to place the pipe. as shown. click to the left of the urinal. For Slope. 36 Move the cursor to the left. enter 0”/12”. For Offset. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. 28 In the Type Selector. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. connect the second toilet. and press Enter.25 Using the same method. and press Enter.

and click OK. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In.39 Move the cursor to the left. 41 Select the top sink. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . and click to connect to the main cold water line. 42 In the Select Connector dialog. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

you create the hot water system. add a water heater. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise.44 Using the same method. 45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Overall.Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and verify that Level 1 . select the 3 sinks. In the left pane of the Open dialog. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 6 In the plan view.rvt. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i. click Training Files. while pressing Ctrl. expand the Unassigned folder.Plumbing Plan . 5 In the System Browser.

the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). in the Unassigned folder. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. enter Domestic Hot Water 107.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. In later steps. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. you edit the system to add equipment. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 10 In the System Browser. When designing systems. 14 Click Modify.6 Gallon. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. Default Domestic Cold Water. Default Domestic Hot Water. 12 In the Type Selector. and click OK. 15 In the System Browser. for System Name. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.Tankless. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. verify that DCW 107 is selected. and click Edit System. 13 In the plan view. as shown. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. under Water Heater . select 0. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders.

24 Move the cursor up. and on the Edit System panel. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . 23 On the Options Bar. as shown. and press Enter. Offset: 4' 6''. click Finish Editing System. and click the water main line. enter 1' 6''. select the water heater. 22 In the Type Selector. for Offset. 19 Select the water heater. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. 27 Click Modify. right-click the middle left connector. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 25 On the Options Bar. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. and select Draw Pipe. enter 10’. 26 Move the cursor to the right. Slope: 0''/12''.

33 On the Edit System panel. enter 9' 0''. and on the Placement Tools panel. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for Offset. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 37 On the Options Bar. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. and press Enter.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. select a sink. select 4'-6''. and in the System Selector. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. select Domestic Hot Water 107. enter 1''. 35 On the Options Bar. click Finish Editing System. click Edit System. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. enter 1' 6''. 36 Move the cursor down. and for Offset. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. for Diameter. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). as shown. 30 On the System Tools panel. and click Draw Pipe. 38 Move the cursor to the right.

41 Move the cursor down. 42 Click Modify.39 Move the cursor down. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . enter 1’. and click just above the bottom sink. for Offset. as shown. and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar. enter 2' 8''.

select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew.43 In the 3D view. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink.

47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.46 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .

264 .

Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system. 265 .

266 .

rvt. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In this tutorial. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. go to http://www.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. If the tutorial training files are not present. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. you can choose to save your work. In the left pane of the Open dialog. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. 2 Right-click Standard. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Duplicate. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems.autodesk. click Training Files. In this lesson. 267 . Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. After finishing each exercise. However. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. You create a new pipe type. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building.

For Offset. For Offset. and then click OK. verify that 9' 0" is selected. In the left pane. you modify the type properties of the pipe. and click Properties. or architectural components.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . verify that 9' 0" is specified. duct. 9 Click OK. In this exercise. and enter Fire Protection Wet. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. structural beams. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. select Main. However. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. 6 In the Project Browser. click Rename. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. under Mechanical. you create project parameters and work with schedules. select Carbon Steel. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. For System Type. select Fire Protection Wet. select Fire Protection Wet. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. For Pipe Type. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. For System Type. Next. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. In the next exercise. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. for Material. For Pipe Type.

enter Sprinkler Zone.Fire Protection Plan . and click Element Properties. Under Categories. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. the space crossing lines display. When you highlight a space using the cursor. select Spaces. 6 In the drawing area. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters.rvt. under Fire Protection. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Name. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. indicating that it’s the active view. for Sprinkler Zone. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . select space Instruction 221 as shown. 8 Using a crossing window.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose.Design is highlighted. For Group parameter under. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. enter Zone 1. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . right-click. select the upper half of the building. and then click OK. click Add. select Fire Protection. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. 5 Click OK twice.

16 Close the file with or without saving it. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. select Zone 1. for Sprinkler Zone. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. to which you add various parameters. and click OK. click Training Files. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. and then click OK. you create schedules for sprinkler design. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and then access instance properties. and then click OK. for Sprinkler Zone.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. enter Zone 2. including a calculated value parameter. verify that only Spaces are selected. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. under Fire Protection. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 In the Filter dialog. 13 Using the same method. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Fire Protection.

In the Maximum Spacing column.Fire Protection Plan . 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. select Feet and fractional inches. Select Schedule keys. indicating that it’s the active view. The schedule displays. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. and on the ribbon. select To the nearest 1'. Click OK.Design is highlighted. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. 9 On the Formatting tab. and click Field Format. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 10 In the Format dialog. enter 15. 6 Using the same method. select Maximum Spacing.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Spaces. select Length.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. For Group parameter under. enter Maximum Spacing. 7 Click OK. enter Light. For Rounding. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click the Formatting tab. click Add Parameter. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. double-click on each column separator. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . For Name. Obstructed-Combustible. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 14 Select the new header. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. 11 Click OK twice. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. for Name. enter Protection Area Construction Type. select Fire Protection. Click OK. For Units. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. For Type of Parameter. For Key name.

Unobstructed Ordinary. select Spaces. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . enter Sprinkler Schedule. under Available fields. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. enter 130. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Click OK. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Unobstructed Extra. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. NOTE The units of measure display automatically.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. 16 Using the same method. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. and press Enter. For Name.

select Common. select 0 decimal place. In the Fields dialog. For Then by.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. For Discipline. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Sorting/Grouping. 20 On the Formatting tab. For Units. For Formula. and click Field Format. select Fixed. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). select Area. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . Select Header and Blank line. 22 Click OK twice. Enter the formula operator / after Area. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. 19 Click the Formatting tab. and click View Properties. select Sprinkler Zone. select Number. select Minimum Sprinklers. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. For Type. click Edit. For Rounding. for Sort by. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. and click OK. click . The Sprinkler Schedule displays. select Level. enter Minimum Sprinklers. Click OK. under Other.

The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. Under Field formatting. ■ In the Format dialog. select Number. verify that Use default settings is selected. for Filter by. 26 Click OK 3 times. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. select Grand totals. and then click Field Format. and then select Hidden field. 27 In the drawing area. select Level equals Level 2. for Filter. select Sprinkler Zone. At the bottom of the dialog. and select Totals only. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Fields. For Fields. For Then by (second instance). 30 Click OK twice. select Level. and click View Properties. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . select Hidden field. select Minimum Sprinklers. click Edit. right-click the schedule.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line.

33 Click in the grouped header cell. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. System Name. for Embedded Schedule. for Fields. For Category. select Grand totals. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. On the Formatting tab. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. select Sprinklers. delete the word Maximum. and select Totals only. double-click Type. Under Field formatting.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. select Calculate totals. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. for Available fields. and click View Properties. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . under Other. click Edit. select Embedded Schedule. select Count. and Count.

41 In the plan view. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. select Ordinary. Unobstructed. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). under Identity Data. 50 Access the instance properties. select space 221 Instruction. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 In the schedule. for Protection Area Construction Type. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. 46 With the space still selected. Unobstructed. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. you are actually editing information in a database of building information.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . The parameter change is evident in the schedule. 48 In the floor plan. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. select Ordinary. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 43 Click Cancel. select Light. double-click FP .Fire Protection Plan Design. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 52 Click OK. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. Unobstructed. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. under Identity Data. and access the instance properties. As a result. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . for Protection Area Construction Type. select space 221 Instruction. and the spacing parameter values are evident. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. under Identity Data. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. but their values are not determined.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

click Training Files. and double-click Level 2 . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. you will understand the process. 279 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . go to http://www. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory.rvt. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. As you place the sprinklers. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. By following the recommended workflow. If the tutorial training files are not present. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. As you create the system. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family.autodesk. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you can choose to save your work. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. However. methodology.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. At the end of this tutorial.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. After finishing each exercise.

open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. When this happens. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. When there is a small misalignment. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 3 In the Project Browser. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. After placing the initial sprinkler. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally.

because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. and select Sprinkler . 11 In the drawing area.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. select the sprinklers that you placed. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . 9 In space Instruction 202. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. 10 Press Esc twice. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. while pressing Ctrl. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. and click to place 3 sprinklers. as shown.Pendent . Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202.

the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. Next. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. as shown. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. verify that Constrain is cleared. 13 On the Options Bar. and then press Esc. Also. you place non-hosted sprinklers. and that Copy and Multiple are selected.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection.

move the cursor to the right. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. enter 14' 6".Design. enter 10' 6". 18 Type WT. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. enter 11. and 200C). 23 Right-click the sprinkler. 19 In the floor plan. 25 Click OK. for Offset.FP_Ceiling view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . For Number. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. 17 In the Project Browser. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. open Design ➤ FP . indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. under Constraints. specify a vertical offset. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . and click Element Properties. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. 200B. 29 Press Esc. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. Next.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. and press Enter.Fire Protection Plan . Notice that the schedule updates. This number is determined in the schedule. you adjust the offset. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. you place non-hosted sprinklers. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down.

Unlike logical connections (systems). and then creating the logical connection between these system components. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 1 In the Project Browser. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. In the next exercise. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP.30 Close the file with or without saving it. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). indicating that it’s the active view. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.Fire Protection Plan . you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. However. After creating the logical connection. and with piping (physical connection). Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Creating a Piping System In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design is highlighted. click Training Files.

all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. named Fire Protection Wet. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. 5 Right-click the header. Creating a Piping System | 285 . As you assign sprinklers to systems. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. as shown. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. within the Piping Systems folder. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. In the System Browser. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. click View ➤ Systems. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and select Piping.

and number of elements in the system. select an initial piping layout. providing system editing tools. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. and on the Options Bar. click Settings.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. verify that Main is selected. enter FP Wet_Zone2.Wet is selected. select Branch. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. 15 In the drawing area. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. and a piping layout preview displays. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. verify that 9' 0" is specified. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. In the left pane. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. system equipment. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. The Generate Layout tools are activated. 12 On the Options Bar. 13 In the System Browser. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. Next. indicating the logical connection. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. for System Name. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. press Tab. place the cursor over a sprinkler. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 14 Click Finish Editing System. and select the system. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. For Pipe Type. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. 19 Click OK. The Edit Piping System panel displays. and click Select. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. 11 With the system still selected. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . For Offset.

When the layout is finished. select 2". The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). 22 On the Options Bar. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . and select solution 5. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. click Solutions.20 On the Generate Layout panel. as shown. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. for Diameter. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. In general. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. enter -12' 0". verify that Network is selected. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. and green represents branch lines). click Place Base. 23 For Offset.

The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. A (parallel movement control) displays. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. as shown. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. 29 Click Finish Layout.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. On the Generate Layout panel. click Modify. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point.

IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. Next. select a different layout solution. Either relocate the system components.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 32 If necessary. and then you create piping to physically connect them. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. or that offset elevations are incorrect. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. and various manual pipe creation tools. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. the Connect Into tool. or manually modify the pipe.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in.Design is highlighted. 3 If necessary. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Fire Protection Plan . click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. click Training Files. 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee.rvt. and select the elbow fitting as shown. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

for Solution Type. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). 9 On the Edit System panel. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. radiators. verify that Network is selected. 13 Click Finish Layout. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. 14 Close the System Browser. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. you can select the pipe or duct. verify that Solutions is selected. 5 In the drawing area.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). mechanical equipment. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . 8 In the corridor. click Add To System. or a system component to display system tools. 12 On the Options Bar. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. and select solution 5. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. 18 Click Finish Editing System. click Finish Editing System. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. and so on) are logically connected by a system. air terminals. and pipe or duct is created. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier.

select 9'. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection .20 Open Design ➤ FP . 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 In the Piping Plan. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 27 On the Options Bar. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. and then press Esc. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 In the Piping Plan. right-click. for Offset. 29 Using the same method. and click Draw Pipe. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. 28 In the drawing area. and then tile the views. 23 View the result in the 3D view. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. 25 Select the sprinkler.

and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. Because the whole system highlights. 31 In the plan view. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view.

4 On the Options Bar.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. select 1/4" = 1'-0". verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. indicating that it’s the active view. double-click on the section head to open the section view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe.rvt. ■ 6 Press Esc.Design is highlighted. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.Fire Protection Plan . 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. for Scale. click Training Files. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . for Diameter. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. select 4".21 On the Options Bar.

select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). 23 Close the 3D view. 24 In the drawing area. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . select 1 1/4". 26 Using the same method. 25 On the Options Bar. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. The pipe diameter is modified. and then tag the piping as shown. for Diameter. and maximize the floor plan. as shown. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers.

Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. For additional practice. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. You added tags to pipes. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. In this tutorial. 28 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. In this exercise. you created a wet fire protection system.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. create details. 305 . and create schedules for construction documentation for a project.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. add annotations and dimensions.

306 .

under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 In the Project Browser. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. and click Rename. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Floor Plans. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. If the view included detail graphics. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. matchlines. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. dependent views. right-click Level 1. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and apply a view template. and view references.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 307 . a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. right-click Copy of Level 1.rvt. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. and click Properties. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click OK. click Training Files.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. as shown. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. and click OK. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. 9 Click OK. and click OK. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click Rename. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 10 In the drawing area. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. views and put them on the sheet. more focused. 6 In the Project Browser. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and click Apply Default View Template. and then press Esc. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .5 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. create dependent views for areas B and C. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. 4 Using the same method. click Training Files. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels.

Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. select black. click the current value. for Target view. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 14 Click Finish Matchline.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. 20 Select the upper view reference and. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. 13 Press Esc twice. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color./ ---). click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . on the Options Bar. For Line Pattern. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Click OK. In the Color dialog. and click OK. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. 19 In the drawing area. select Double Dash 5/8". 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. and then press Esc. select 11. 21 Using the same method. For Line Weight.

27 Using the same method. as shown. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. and zoom to each of the view references. 25 Using the same method.

click Training Files. for View Name. For Default View Template. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. enter Plumbing Isometric . and select the section box. select Plumbing Isometric. Click OK. 2 Zoom in. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin.Domestic Water. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . 4 In the Project Browser. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. right-click Plumbing Isometric . 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. right-click 3D Plumbing. for View Classification. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. select Documentation. and click Apply Default View Template. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click to select it. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 6 In the Project Browser. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently.rvt. and click Properties. For Sub-Discipline. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping.Domestic Water.29 Close the file with or without saving it. Under Graphics. The section crop lines no longer display. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. select Plumbing.

Click Apply. select Dash. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". For Pattern. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 12 Using the same method. and click to select it. select 3. press Tab 3 times. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . The selected piping displays as a dashed line. and then click OK.9 Right-click. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight.

Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . as shown).13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. and click to select it. 14 Right-click. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights.

Right-click.15 Press Esc. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . press Tab 3 times. click Reveal Hidden Elements. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label.Sanitary Waste. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. On the View Control Bar. and click to select it. In the drawing area. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 18 Using methods learned previously. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. On the View Control Bar.Domestic Water view with detailing.

you use a plan view to create a callout view. In the Format dialog. and then place the callout view on a sheet.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. When the view is associated with a sheet. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. For Slope. for Rounding. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. 21 Click OK twice. as shown. 25 Press Esc twice. and click to place the spot slope annotation. select To the nearest 1/8". click on the Format value. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Common is selected. Creating Callout Views | 315 . the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope.

beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 5 On the Options Bar. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. click Training Files. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . for Scale. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select 1/4"=1'-0''.rvt. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan).

under Sheets (all). double-click M601 . Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. drag it to the sheet. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Project Browser. Creating Callout Views | 317 . select 5.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. Click OK. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. for Line Weight. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. using the same method.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown.

The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. enter WSHP PART PLAN. and select the viewport. Click OK. and click Apply Default View Template. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. for View Name. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 17 In the Project Browser. For Title on Sheet. right-click the callout view.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. For Default View Template. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. Creating Callout Views | 319 . 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers.Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section.

and click OK. right-click the detail view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 25 In the Project Browser. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. and click OK. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. under Names. and click Apply View Template. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 28 In the Apply View Template dialog.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Rename. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 26 In the Rename View dialog. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. enter Typical WSHP Detail.

321 . linetypes. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. and annotation to create a legend. ■ work with model-based components.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. symbols. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. duct tags.

and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. as shown. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. 8 With the text still selected. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C.Creating Annotations In this exercise. click Training Files. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center).

Creating Annotations | 323 . a return diffuser. and then click Right Straight. Add leaders 10 Select the text box.9 Press Esc twice. a segment of round duct. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. 15 On the Options Bar. verify that Leader is cleared. and a segment of rectangular duct. 16 In the drawing area. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. select a supply diffuser. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. as shown. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight.

Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. and click Open. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. 22 In the Tags dialog. under Category. 21 In the Load Family dialog. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. clear Leader. for Ducts. 24 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . tag the remaining diffusers in the area. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. 17 Click Modify. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method.rfa.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. 20 In the Tags dialog. click Load. If necessary.

Creating Annotations | 325 . and Attached End. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. select Horizontal. 26 On the Options Bar. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A.25 In the drawing area. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. 31 On the Options Bar. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. 32 In the drawing area. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. and then press Esc. as shown. Leader.

35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. select Free End. 34 In the drawing area. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . as shown. for Leader. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor.33 On the Options Bar.

and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and lock lighting fixtures. select the last tag placed. you use temporary dimensions to locate. not simply an instance property. select Dot Open 1/16". Creating Dimensions | 327 . and all elements of that type are affected.36 Press Esc twice. 40 Using the method learned previously. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. 37 In the drawing area. lay out. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. That’s because you changed a type property. for Leader Arrowhead. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK.

11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. and then select the interior face of the wall. On the Options Bar. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. indicating that it’s the active view. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. click Training Files. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture.rvt. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 12 Press Esc. select the dimension line.

20 Close the file with or without saving it. linework. and press Enter. click the 3 interior locks on the line. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. 16 Press Esc. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. and offset them 8' from the wall. and notes. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. enter 8'.3 1/2"). Creating a Legend In this exercise. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures.13 Using the same method. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. Creating a Legend | 329 . 19 Using the same methods. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . annotation symbols. Because the dimensions are locked.

Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . For Scale. 10 Using the same method. enter Diffuser Legend. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser .■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 1/4" = 1' -0".rvt. click Training Files.8 Neck. ■ 9 In the drawing area. For View. select Floor Plan. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. click below the title to place the diffuser. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Click OK. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 5 Click in the drawing area. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser .

click next to the top diffuser.11 Press Esc. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Creating a Legend | 331 . 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. 14 In the drawing area. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify.

21 Press Esc. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE .RISE symbol for the copy start point. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . The selected detail lines are now thin. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 24 Select the component’s break line.DROP and its text note. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 27 While pressing Ctrl. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then press Esc. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 26 Press Esc. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol.

30 Select Spot Elevation . enter E. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. 34 Using the method learned previously. 33 Click to the left of the left break line.MECHANICAL LEGEND. 35 Change the text on the right to N. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. Creating a Legend | 333 . in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. and then click Modify.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Modify. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . mirror the text on the center reference line of the component.

click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 40 Press Esc. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.39 With the viewport still selected. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

detail groups. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. A detail callout that references another view. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i.Detailing 15 In this lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . A drafting view using detail components.rvt.113 East elevation view. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. and text. click Training Files. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. 335 . A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

clear Leader. Next.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. select each of the 2 panelboards. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. 5 In the drawing area. and then modify and align the views. 8 Using the same method. place Power Riser . Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. 7 Drag the Power Riser . Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. and click to place it.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .113 East on the sheet.

right-click. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . and click OK. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click Deactivate View. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. under Identity Data. 13 Right-click. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. select the 113 North view. giving the appearance of a single view. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. for Title on Sheet. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. 12 Select the Level 1 line. and click Activate View.9 Press Esc.

In the next exercise. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. 22 Press Esc. as shown. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. 21 Using the drag control. right-click. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 19 Select the Level 1 line. right-click. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. select the 113 East elevation view. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. and click Activate View. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. you add wiring to the diagram.

for Name. notice that there are no snaps active. In the Line Styles dialog. 9 Beginning at the transformer. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . select 6. indicating that it’s the active view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Chain is selected. expand Lines. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . and then click OK. click New. As you draw. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . Under Modify Subcategories.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser.113 North view. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. In the New Subcategory dialog. 2 Close the Project Browser. as shown. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). and click OK. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. click Training Files. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. for Line Weight. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 8 On the Options Bar. enter Electrical Power.

add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as shown.10 Press Esc. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 11 Using the same method. 13 On the Options Bar. enter 1/8". for Offset. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard.

16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. so that the result is as shown. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. TIP When you use the Trim tool.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 28 Click above the cap. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. as shown. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 29 Click Modify. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text.

344 | Chapter 15 Detailing .31 While pressing Ctrl. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. select Multiple. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 33 On the Options Bar. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints.

You enter exact values for each line length. 40 Press Esc. enter 3/32".5. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. for Offset. 39 Move the cursor to the right. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . 42 On the Options Bar. and press Enter.36 Press Esc. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. and then press Esc. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. enter 0 0.

click on the length dimension value. and press Enter. select all 3 lines. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 46 In the Project Browser. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. Using the same method. 47 In the drawing area. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. 50 With the group selected.25. Press Esc. you can ensure that they stay together. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser.125. enter 0 0. and click OK. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. expand Groups ➤ Detail. for Name. enter Ground. while pressing Ctrl. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. and then press Esc.

and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. TP-2B. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard.51 Using the method learned previously. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 54 Select the group. 52 Select the detail group. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click OK. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and will place it on sheet E01. 3 In the Rename View dialog. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. 5 Zoom in to view the section. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. 2 Right-click the copy. for Name. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. In later exercises. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport.rvt.

click Home. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . and then press Esc. and then click the corner where the Top. 7 On the ViewCube.6 Select the section box. and Left sides converge. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. Back.

Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. and click Apply View Template. select 3D HVAC Iso. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. Under Names. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. right-click. Walkthroughs.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. select 3D Views. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Click OK. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail.

label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Typical. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. 19 Complete the text labels. (Right). and click to specify the second leader point. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. as shown. 15 Using the same method. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Move the cursor down and to the left.

To rotate and reposition a text label. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click on the crop region. 25 Click OK. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. under Extents. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. as shown. select Crop Region Visible. and then click OK. and under Extents. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents.

The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). In the left pane of the Open dialog. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. and click Properties. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. select 3" = 1'-0". 30 Close the file with or without saving it. Use detail lines to create a detail group. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail.rvt. Click OK. For Scale. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. right-click the view name. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.29 In the drawing area. click Training Files. 3 In the Project Browser. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. select the isometric view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. Place a detail component. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View.

7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). as the rectangle start point. 13 In the drawing area.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select Documentation. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". For View Classification. select Plumbing. 9 Zoom in to the component. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. as shown. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Sub-Discipline. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. click the point at the top of the drain. 12 On the Element panel. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. Click OK.

I.P. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. (Line). click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. Concrete. 20 Select 1. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 18 With the filled region still selected. select C.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. select the filled region. and then press Esc. 21 In the drawing area. 23 In the drawing area. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Click Modify.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. for Type. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. and click OK.

select Multiple. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. and then click point 6 as the endpoint.28 Click Modify. 31 On the Options Bar. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then click to select them. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 34 Press Esc. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines.

as shown. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 40 Click Finish Region. 45 Using the method learned previously. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. and then press Esc.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. (Rectangle). Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. and then select the side of the slab above the line.

Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. 49 Click Modify. as shown.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select the Flashing Membrane group. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. draw wide detail lines as shown. 52 In the Create Group dialog. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group.D. enter Flashing Membrane_F. press Tab to highlight the chain. for Name. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. and click OK.. and then click to select them. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area.

59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. Drafting Detail Components | 359 .55 Press Esc. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. as shown. 61 Using the same method. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge.

62 Press Esc twice. 64 Press Esc twice. and then click OK. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 70 In the Keynotes dialog. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 71 Click Modify. 72 If necessary. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 67 On the Options Bar.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. select Leader and Free End. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. as shown.

74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. 81 Select the text note. 78 Move the cursor to the left. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right).Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 80 Press Esc twice. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. and click to specify the second leader point. and click to specify the text insertion point. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 76 To select the leader start point. Drafting Detail Components | 361 .

84 Using the following image as a guide. as shown.82 Continue annotating the detail. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . click to select the slab lines in the order indicated.

open P103 . Drafting Detail Components | 363 .85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. and then press Esc twice. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 88 In the drawing area. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. select the view title. 90 Press Esc.Plumbing Part Plans & Details.

for Line Weight. Click OK. Click Open. For Layers. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. select Auto-Detect. you import a CAD detail drawing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Visible. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.dwg.rvt. select Black and White. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. select 3. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. For Import units. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. For A-----NPP. For Colors.

10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. select the viewport title.8 Type ZF.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . open P103 . 12 In the drawing area. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. and then press Esc. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. 11 Press Esc.

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful